JP7083876B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) that is configured to change the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the game state is set to the predetermined game value by the player. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who can easily win the ball, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop or shake in a state of matching with a specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value of a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-101428

There was room to enhance the commercial value of the gaming machine having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced commercial value.

The gaming machine of the present invention
It is possible to receive the signal output from the gaming device, execute the variable display of the specific identification information, and derive the specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, which is an advantageous state for the player. In a game machine that can be controlled
Game control means and
Production control means and
Display means and
A means for imparting a game value based on a signal output from the game device, and a means for imparting a game value.
The game control means is
It is possible to control the setting permission state to allow the setting of the setting value,
A specific signal can be output while controlling to the setting permission state.
When the game medium enters the starting area, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed, and the specific identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the determination, the first fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, the second fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Any variation pattern is determined from a plurality of variation patterns including the third variation pattern, which is the third variation pattern, and the fourth variation pattern, which is the variation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state.
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, the first command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, the second command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the third fluctuation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command is transmitted to the staging control means.
The granting means can grant a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device when controlled to the setting permission state.
The staging control means
The variable display of the decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed by using the display means.
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the control is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is controlled to the advantageous state by a specific reach whose expectation degree to be controlled to the advantageous state is different from that of the predetermined reach.
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
It is possible to execute a common effect in a predetermined period until the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach and the title notification corresponding to the specific reach are performed.
When the first command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed.
When the second command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the production mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is completed.
When the third command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed.
When the fourth command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the production mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is completed.
When the first command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the predetermined reach.
When the second command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the specific reach.
When the third command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the predetermined reach.
When the fourth command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the specific reach.
When the first command is received, a character display for showing that the advantageous state is controlled is displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and then the decoration identification information is displayed in a reach mode. The display means is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in a manner indicating that the predetermined size is larger than that of the case and the control is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the second command is received, a character display for indicating that the advantageous state is controlled is displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and then the decorative identification information is displayed in the predetermined size and the advantageous state. The display means is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in an manner indicating that the state is controlled .
The game control means is
When the power is turned on and controlled to the setting permission state, the external signal is output during the period controlled by the setting permission state and for a specific period after the setting permission state ends.
When the power is turned on and the initialization process for initializing the storage of the storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting permission state, the external signal is output over the specific period.
Further, (means 1) the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105 IWS216) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) and a plurality of types of suggestion effects. When any of the suggestion effects is executed, a notification effect (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") for notifying a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effect is executed is executed. 20-13 (B), a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing the notification display 105IW003) is provided, and a predetermined period is notified in the notification effect. After that, the notification of the predetermined period cannot be recognized before the predetermined period elapses (for example, the portion where step 105IWS210 is executed in the effect control CPU 120), and the title corresponding to the suggestion effect can be notified. The title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 21-2). (D), (F)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the suggestion effect execution means can be executed at a plurality of timings during variable display according to the type of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the advance notice effect A is high speed. It may be configured to be executed during the fluctuation, the advance notice effect B is executed when the reach is established, and the advance notice effect C is executed after the reach is established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, when a long period as a predetermined period is notified in the notification effect, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a short period is notified as a predetermined period (for example). , As shown in FIG. 20-6, the higher the notification period is, the higher the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot may be. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to which period is notified as a predetermined period.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to the means 3, the notification effect executing means performs the notification effect by a plurality of types of notification modes (for example, rectangular display, elliptical display, and diamond display shown in FIGS. 20-7). Even if it is feasible, the same type of suggestion effect is executed, and the same period is notified as a predetermined period in the notification effect, the ratio controlled to an advantageous state according to the type of the notification mode of the notification effect is It is configured to be different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-7, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is different depending on whether it is a rectangular display, an elliptical display, or a diamond display). May be good. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to which notification mode is used to execute the notification effect.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to the means 4, the notification effect executing means elapses the predetermined period at the timing immediately before the predetermined period elapses after the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable. Notify that the timing is immediately before (in this example, the remaining time is displayed as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E) to (G)) (for example, the portion where steps 105IWS213 to S214 are executed in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to means 5, after the notification for a predetermined period is unrecognizable, a predetermined effect (for example, numerical effect) using a numerical value is executed by the time when the predetermined period elapses. It may be configured to include a possible predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105 IWS212). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

(Means 7) In any of the means 1 to the means 5, a predetermined effect (for example, step-up) in which the mode changes stepwise until the predetermined period elapses after the notification for the predetermined period is unrecognizable. It is configured to include a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes the same process as step 105 IWS212 in the effect control CPU 120 to execute the step-up advance notice effect and the pseudo-ream) that can execute the advance notice effect and the pseudo-ream. You may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following means 8 to 15. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the staging effect, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the staging effect.

(Means 8) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the above-mentioned advantage. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and a title notification means (for example, effect) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. A control CPU 120), and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 21-2 (D), F)).
According to such a configuration, the staging effect can be enhanced.

(Means 9) In the means 8, the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period is common. It may be made feasible in (for example, FIG. 21-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(Means 10) In the means 8 or the means 9, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a advance notice effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state at a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect. The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 8 to the means 10, the suggestion effect executing means has at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect as the suggestion effect. (For example, the reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) can be executed, and the title notification means corresponds to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. The title may be notified.
According to such a configuration, the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(Means 12) In the means 11, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 8 to the means 12, the suggestion effect executing means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period. ..
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(Means 14) In any of the means 8 to the means 13, a detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of a player and a specific display (for example, a small button) corresponding to the detection means. The specific display executing means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) for performing the image 31AK043, the large button image 31AK047, and the stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display executing means is the first specific display (for example, small) as the specific display. The button image 31AK043) and the second specific display (for example, the large button image 31AK047 and the stick image 31AK051), which are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display, can be displayed, and the detection by the detection means is ineffective. During the period, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 21-10 (E) and 21-11 (I)), and detection by the detection means is performed. The operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed during the valid period of (for example, FIGS. 21-11 (J), (K)).
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(Means 15) In any of the means 8 to the means 14, as a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display in which the display size is the first size (FIG. 21-12 (FIG. 21-12). The first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in a) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIGS. 21-12 (d)). A display means (for example, an image display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like) is further provided, and the display means has a plurality of types of elements (FIGS. 21-12) having different modes. A specific image (FIG.) composed of elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in (a) and (d). 21-12 (a), the fruit pattern shown in (d), etc.) can be displayed, and when either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, Display so that a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (either of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 21-12 (a) and 21-12 (d). It may be displayed so that the elements E1 to E5 are included in the above).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of a gaming medium when changing a set value. The inventions according to the means A1 to the means A9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for appropriately performing control regarding the addition of a gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball lending, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball lending, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) for imparting a game medium based on a signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Equipped with
When controlled to the setting change mode, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. When controlled to the setting change mode, the game control microcomputer 100 is restricted. Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037). 2. When the setting change mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control micro The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. For payout control, because the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when controlled to the setting change mode (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command). Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, the EXS signal is not turned on.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. And, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to the changeable setting change mode. During the period controlled to the setting change mode, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. Do not execute ball lending.

Further, as a gaming machine of means AA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball lending, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball lending, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) for imparting a game medium based on a signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Equipped with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. When the setting change mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 is used. The connection confirmation signal is not turned on (not output to the payout control board 21TM037). 2. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled. 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 4. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection check command). Even if the computer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.),
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium when the setting change mode is controlled. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
The specific control means and the setting change mode control means are provided, and a game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the game machine is provided.
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The giving means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means.
When the game control means is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the special signal is not output (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 for outputting the connection confirmation signal is a setting change. Executed after the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. It is possible to add a game medium based on the input of a second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. When the connection confirmation signal is not input, the PRDY signal is not turned on. 2. Connection confirmation. Do not turn on the PRDY signal when no command is received),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
The specific control means and the setting change mode control means are provided, and a game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the game machine is provided.
At least one of the game control means and the granting means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is an open state detecting means (for example, an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which the game machine frame or the door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened. A gaming machine frame equipped with a gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the addition of the game medium is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a is restricted. Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, it is possible to limit the addition of the gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the input of the grant request signal from the gaming device (the BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal of the grant preparation signal. When the grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to the input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the gaming medium is fastened.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is used, the setting change mode control means is used. ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the above setting change mode and
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is used, the setting confirmation mode control means is used. ) When 21TM052 is off), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
A staging control means (CPU 120 for staging control) for controlling the execution of the staging is provided.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the staging control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means A2 to the means A9 and the means A1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means A2 to the means A9 and the means AA.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device when changing a set value. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball lending, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball lending, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls a payout motor 21TM289) that executes a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device, and a predetermined control means.
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device can be executed (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on and the connection confirmation command and the prize ball count command can be transmitted. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled by the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when the setting change mode is controlled. ..

Further, as a gaming machine of means BA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball lending, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball lending, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls a payout motor 21TM289) that executes a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device, and a predetermined control means.
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device can be executed (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on and the connection confirmation command and the prize ball count command can be transmitted. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled by the setting change mode).
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. can. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power failure, etc.) while the predetermined control is being executed, and then the predetermined control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without immediately resuming the ball lending).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of the subsequent power restoration, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. Ball lending will not resume even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state), the setting change mode control means is in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029), the game state is notified (display). Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
A staging control means (CPU 120 for staging control) for controlling the execution of the staging is provided.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the staging control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means B2 to the means B7 and the means B1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means B2 to the means B7 and the means BA.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately perform control when the gaming medium passes through a specific region when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a gaming medium passes through a specific region.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Specific control (special) according to the set value (set value 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing big hit determination processing in symbol process processing, and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

Further, as a means CA gaming machine for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
Specific control (special) according to the set value (set value 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing big hit determination processing in symbol process processing, and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (it is controlled to the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

In addition, a plurality of types of lengths of a predetermined period until the suggestion effect is executed, which is notified in the notification effect, are provided (for example, any one of "10 seconds", "20 seconds", and "30 seconds" is notified). By selecting the length of the predetermined period using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of the length of the predetermined period differs depending on the set value and notifying the predetermined period of the selected length, the player can notify each length of the predetermined period. The set value may be inferred from the appearance ratio of the sword. By doing so, the length of the predetermined period is rich in variation, and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each length, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, after notifying a predetermined period in the notification effect, there are a plurality of types of timings at which the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, "3 seconds before" the predetermined period elapses). (Make unrecognizable "4 seconds ago" and "5 seconds ago"), and select the timing to make it unrecognizable using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of the timing to make it unrecognizable differs depending on the set value. By making the notification for a predetermined period unrecognizable at the timing, the player may be able to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each timing. By doing so, the timing at which the notification for a predetermined period is made unrecognizable is rich in variation, and moreover, the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each timing, so that the gaming interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
It is a gaming machine of means C1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state), the setting change mode control means is in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
A staging control means (CPU 120 for staging control) for controlling the execution of the staging is provided.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the staging control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means C1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means C2 to the means C6 and the means CA.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1 is
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode that informs the set value so that it can be confirmed.
It is provided with a setting value storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing the setting value.
In the setting change mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch (clear switch (clear switch)). Control to the setting change mode based on the setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state),
In the setting confirmation mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
The set value is determined based on the specific operation in the setting change mode (the operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state).
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode when controlled by the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (controlled to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is controlled.

Further, as a gaming machine of means DA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode that informs the set value so that it can be confirmed.
It is provided with a setting value storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing the setting value.
In the setting change mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch (clear switch (clear switch)). Control to the setting change mode based on the setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state),
In the setting confirmation mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
The set value is determined based on the specific operation in the setting change mode (the operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state).
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode when controlled by the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (controlled to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is controlled. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
It is a gaming machine of means D1 and
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the operation) is performed, it is controlled to the above setting change mode, and
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the display monitor 21TM029 blinks the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has been completed.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3.
A game control means (a game control micro that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controls the progress of the game in the game machine. Computer 100) and
A staging control means (CPU 120 for staging control) for executing staging control is provided.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the staging control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D4.
Timing after the power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 has a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 was operated was received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected" and "the operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.
The correspondence between the means D2 to the means D5 and the means D1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means D2 to the means D5 and the means DA.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions relating to the means E1 to the means E8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. be.

The gaming machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different).
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the 1st terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) from the 2nd terminal (7th terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means EA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506.
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different).
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the 1st terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) from the 2nd terminal (7th terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed).
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode is controlled by the specific signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
It is a gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal). Continues to output security signals for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode is controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is made by the specific signal. You can see that it may be controlled by the change mode.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
It is a gaming machine of means E4,
The setting confirmation mode can be controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Controlled to setting confirmation mode based on),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when controlled to the setting change mode (the signal corresponding to the setting change is output when controlled to the setting change mode), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode (the signal corresponding to the setting change is output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E7.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the effect control CPU 120). When the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch was operated and the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was operated were received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected. , "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.
The correspondence between the means E2 to the means E8 and the means E1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means E2 to the means E8 and the means EA.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to a set value, but JP-A-2014-200506. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 0102 is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions relating to the means F1 to the means F11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different).
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

Further, as a means FA gaming machine for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506.
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different).
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). The part that executes step 105 IWS 216 in the CPU 120) and
When any of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effects are executed is set. It is provided with a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the display of the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B)) to be notified.
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS210). The game machine to be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
Means F1 gaming machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
When the setting change mode ends, the special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting change mode ends, the number of pulses corresponding to the fixed set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
Means F2 gaming machine
When controlled to the setting change mode, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode) is output, and when the setting change mode ends. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change compatible signal once when the setting change mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped settings corresponding to the fixed set value) is set. Output the change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting confirmation mode ends, the special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting confirmation mode ends, the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
Means F4 gaming machine,
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is ON during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode) is output, and when the setting confirmation mode ends. After stopping the output of the special signal once (after turning off the setting change compatible signal once when the setting confirmation mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value) Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F5.
In the special signal of the special aspect, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of outputs of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. be),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F6.
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
It is a gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside by a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
It is a gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change compatible signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change compatible signal is output from the 7th terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a manner in which the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F9.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output with the end of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, it is output. Regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as the setting change corresponding signal). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F10.
A special signal of the special aspect is output with the end of the process related to the change of the set value (a pulse shape of a number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting change mode). Outputs the setting change corresponding signal of, and outputs the pulsed setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode), and the special signal. After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger different from the process related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state). Outputs the number of pulsed setting change compatible signals corresponding to the set values),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the chance that the set value can be specified in the external device.
The correspondence between the means F2 to the means F11 and the means F1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means F2 to the means F11 and the means FA.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 105IW. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification period determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the numerical effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the staging process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the notification effect, the numerical effect, and the advance notice effect are executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the notification effect, the numerical effect, and the advance notice effect are executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of performing a story reach effect and an end effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of performing a story reach effect and an end effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of performing a story reach effect and an end effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the super reach effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the super reach effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the super reach effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display in a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a front view simplified from the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command sent and received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line which is used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a CPU for payout control executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which a CPU for payout control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining the communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example that the ball lending is not restricted in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which restarts the payout after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of forcibly terminating the payout with the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission / reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission / reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when the setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting value and the output mode of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and the output period of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per ordinary figure", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the effect mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "missing". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title is notified by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled, and the staging effect is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of staging operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the staging operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following staging operation is executed by the staging control CPU 120 executing the staging control process process based on the staging control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introduction part until the notification is made, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (Fig. 9). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, and in the case of a reach with a low jackpot reliability, the super is announced. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach production.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed because the effect of the effect can be improved in any case.

Although the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A definite decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the deciding effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display, but the reach effect is in progress. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character resident during the variable display, and the display related to the mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the staging operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars of. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expected degree suggestion effect becomes various and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation degree. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's line (for example, the display color of the line) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the dialogue in the reach production is provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible staging modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible staging modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (the ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). FIGS. 10 (B) to 10 (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be performed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the control line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, operation effect image to be displayed, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature 105IW)
Next, the feature portion 105IW of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 105IW. As shown in FIG. 20-1, the feature portion 105IW is provided with a passage gate 105IW041 on the right side (right side of the game area) of the image display device 5 instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. .. Further, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 105IW007 having a large winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area. Further, in this feature portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-1, an operation gate 105IW001 is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball that has passed through the actuated gate 105IW001 is detected by the actuated gate switch 105IW002.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol stop processing (step S113), the feature unit 105IW does not immediately shift to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), but shifts to the gate passage waiting process.

FIG. 20-2 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process. In the gate passage waiting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the operation gate switch 105IW002 is turned on (step 105IWS001). If the actuated gate switch 105IW002 is not in the ON state (that is, if the game ball has not passed through the actuated gate 105IW001), the process ends as it is. If the operation gate switch 105IW002 is in the ON state (that is, if the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (that is, if the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001). Step 105 IWS002). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit start pre-processing (step 105IWS003).

By executing the gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 20-2, the feature unit 105IW does not immediately start the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, but the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. After that, the big hit game state is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001. In addition, in this feature unit 105IW, by executing the process of step 105IWS002, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001 based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command. It is possible to recognize that the jackpot game state is started.

In the feature portion 105IW, the state after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed and before the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 is also referred to as a gate waiting state.

FIG. 20-3 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (the area in which the received variation pattern command (effect control command for establishing the variation pattern) is stored) ( Step 105 IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 receives the fluctuation pattern command read in step 105IWS101 and the display result designation command storage area (received display result designation command (display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss). ) Is stored in the area where the effect control command) is stored), and the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data (that is, the received display result specification command) (step 105IWS102). .. That is, by executing the process of step 105 IWS 102 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 105IWS102. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 105IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 105 IWS 102, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal big hit", the staging control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol having three symbols of the same even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of a probabilistic state (an odd numbered symbol in this feature 105IW) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it does not enter a probabilistic state (an even symbol in this feature 105IW) is a non-probable symbol. Also called.

In addition, in this feature unit 105IW, in the case of a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, there are cases where it is controlled to a 16-round big hit gaming state and a case where it is controlled to a 4-round big hit gaming state.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol (step 105IWS103). In step 105 IWS 103, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the advance notice effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect, and determines the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect.

FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-4, determination values are assigned to the advance notice effect determination table for the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect B, and the advance notice effect C, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the feature portion 105IW, the timings at which the advance notice effects A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol are different. Specifically, the advance notice effect A is an advance notice effect executed during high-speed fluctuation during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the advance notice effect B is an advance notice effect executed when the reach is established during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, the advance notice effect C is an advance notice effect executed after the reach is established during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 20-4, in this feature unit 105IW, the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is the highest when the notice effect C is executed, and the expectation for the next big hit when the notice effect B is executed. The degree (reliability) is high, and the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest when the advance notice A is executed. Therefore, the feature unit 105IW is configured so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit becomes higher as the advance notice effect at the later timing is executed.

As specific examples of the advance notice effects A to C, various advance notice effects such as a step-up advance notice effect, a group advance notice effect, a character advance notice effect, and a character advance notice effect can be considered. Further, in the feature unit 105IW, the case where the three types of advance notice effects A to C are executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, four or more types of notice effects may be configured to be executable, or conversely, only two types of notice effects may be configured to be executable.

Further, in the feature unit 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case where the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the allocation of the advance notice effect A to C are different depending on whether or not the hit is a big hit is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the type of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of advance notice effect, and the allocation of any of the advance notice effects A to C are configured to be different depending on the number of pseudo-reams. May be good.

When it is decided to execute any of the advance notice effects (Y in step 105IWS104), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notification effect (step 105IWS105). The "notification effect" is an effect of notifying the period until the advance notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. In step 105 IWS 105, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the notification effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect, and determines whether or not to execute the notification effect. ..

FIG. 20-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the notification effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-5, determination values are assigned to "without notification effect" and "with notification effect" in the notification effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-5, in this feature unit 105IW, even when the same notice effect is executed, when the notification effect is executed, it is a big hit as compared with the case where the notification effect is not executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for is high.

In addition, in this feature part 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-5, the case where the allocation of the presence or absence of the notification effect is different depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the allocation of the presence / absence of the notification effect may be different depending on which of the advance notice effects A to C.

When it is decided to execute the notification effect (Y in step 105IWS106), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notification period to be notified before the execution of the advance notice effect (step 105IWS107). In step 105 IWS 107, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the notification period determination table for determining the notification period, and determines the notification period.

FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the notification period determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-6 (A) shows a specific example of the notification period determination table used when the advance notice effect A is executed. Further, FIG. 20-6 (B) shows a specific example of the notification period determination table used when the advance notice effect B is executed. Further, FIG. 20-6 (C) shows a specific example of the notification period determination table used when the advance notice effect C is executed. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in the notification period determination table, determination values are assigned to the notification periods of "10 seconds", "20 seconds", and "30 seconds", respectively.

The feature unit 105IW is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying the period until the advance notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. For example, when "10 seconds" is determined as the notification period, a character display such as "10 seconds later?" Is displayed as a notification display on the image display device 5 10 seconds before the advance notice effect is executed. It is notified that the advance notice effect will be executed after 10 seconds. Further, for example, when "20 seconds" is determined as the notification period, a character display such as "20 seconds later?" Is displayed as a notification display on the image display device 5 20 seconds before the advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is notified that the advance notice effect will be executed after 20 seconds. Further, for example, when "30 seconds" is determined as the notification period, a character display such as "30 seconds later?" Is displayed as a notification display on the image display device 5 30 seconds before the advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is notified that the advance notice effect will be executed after 30 seconds.

The notification mode in the notification effect is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when "20 seconds" is determined as the notification period, the image display device 5 may notify "10 seconds later?" And then additionally notify "+10 seconds". Further, for example, when "30 seconds" is determined as the notification period, the image display device 5 notifies "10 seconds later?" And then additionally notifies "+10 seconds" or "+20 seconds". You may do it.

As shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), when the advance notice effect A is executed, "10 seconds" is determined with a 100% probability as the notification period. As described above, the notice effect A is a notice effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, so that the notice effect is executed until the notice period is notified until the notice effect is executed. It is not possible to secure a long period. Therefore, when the advance notice effect A executed during the high-speed fluctuation is executed, the notification effect for notifying "10 seconds" as the notification period is uniformly executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when the advance notice effect B is executed, "10 seconds" and "20 seconds" can be determined as the notification period. As described above, since the advance notice effect B is a advance notice effect executed when the reach is established, it is longer than the advance notice effect A from the execution of the notification effect to the notification of the notification period until the advance notice effect is executed. You can secure a period. Therefore, when the notice effect B to be executed when the reach is established is executed, it is configured so that the notification effect of notifying "10 seconds" and the notification effect of notifying "20 seconds" can be executed as the notification period. ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when the advance notice effect B is executed, the case where "20 seconds" is notified as the notification period is the case where "10 seconds" is notified as the notification period. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than that. Therefore, the feature unit 105IW is configured so that the higher the notification period is, the higher the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when the advance notice effect C is executed, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", and "30 seconds" can be determined as the notification period. As described above, the advance notice effect C is a advance notice effect executed after the reach is established. Therefore, as compared with the advance notice effect A and the advance notice effect B, the advance notice effect is executed to notify the notification period, and then the advance notice effect is executed. You can secure a long period until it is done. Therefore, when the notice effect C, which is executed when the reach is established, is executed, the notification effect of notifying "10 seconds", the notification effect of notifying "20 seconds", and the notification effect of notifying "30 seconds" as the notification period are executed. And is configured to be feasible.

As shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when the notice effect C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the highest when "30 seconds" is notified as the notification period, and "20 seconds". When "" is notified, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the next highest, and when "10 seconds" is notified, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest. Therefore, the feature unit 105IW is configured so that the higher the notification period is, the higher the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot.

As described above, in the feature unit 105IW, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher as the advance notice effect at the later timing is executed (see FIG. 20-4), and as a result. The later the advance notice effect is executed, the longer the notification period is notified.

Further, the feature unit 105IW shows a case where three types of periods of "10 seconds", "20 seconds" and "30 seconds" are notified as the notification period, but the notification period is not limited to such a mode. For example, four or more types of notification periods may be configured to be able to be notified, or conversely, only two types of notification periods may be configured to be able to be notified.

Further, in the feature unit 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-6, the case where the allocation of the type of the notification period is different depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the allocation of the type of notification period is configured to be different depending on whether or not there is a reach, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the type of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-reams, and whether the notification effects A to C are used. May be good.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notification mode of the notification period (step 105IWS108). In step 105 IWS 108, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the notification mode determination table for determining the notification mode, and determines the notification mode.

FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the notification mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the notification mode determination table, determination values are assigned to "rectangular display", "elliptical display", and "diamond display" as notification modes, respectively.

When "rectangular display" is determined as the notification mode, the notification effect is executed, for example, by displaying a character display such as "10 seconds later?" As a notification display in the rectangular display. When "elliptical display" is determined as the notification mode, the notification effect is executed, for example, by displaying a character display such as "10 seconds later?" In the elliptical display as the notification display. When "diamond display" is determined as the notification mode, the notification effect is executed, for example, by displaying a character display such as "10 seconds later?" In the diamond display as the notification display.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, when the diamond-shaped display is determined as the notification mode, the expectation for the jackpot (reliability) is the highest, and when the elliptical display is determined as the notification mode, the expectation for the next jackpot (reliability) is the highest. The reliability) is high, and when the rectangular display is determined as the notification mode, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the numerical effect (step 105IWS109). The "numerical effect" is an effect that is executed using a numerical value or a numerical value after the notification effect is executed and the notification period is notified until the notification period elapses and the advance notice effect is executed. In step 105 IWS109, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a numerical effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the numerical effect, and determines whether or not to execute the numerical effect. ..

FIG. 20-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the numerical effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 20-8, in the numerical effect determination table, determination values are assigned to "without numerical effect" and "with numerical effect", respectively. As shown in FIG. 20-8, in the feature unit 105IW, when the numerical effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than the case where the numerical effect is not executed.

Further, in this feature portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-8, the case where the allocation of the presence / absence of the numerical effect is different depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured so that the allocation of the presence or absence of the numerical effect is different depending on whether or not there is a reach, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the type of the pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-reams, and whether the advance notice effects A to C are used. May be good.

Further, for example, the allocation of the presence / absence of the numerical effect may be different depending on the type of the notification period (“10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”). Further, for example, when a plurality of types of numerical effects can be executed, it may be configured so that different types of numerical effects can be easily executed depending on the type of notification period. For example, when the notification period is short "10 seconds", it is easy to execute the numerical effect A executed at an early timing, and when the notification period is long "30 seconds", the numerical effect executed at a late timing is easy to execute. It may be configured not to execute B. Further, for example, in the case of "10 seconds" where the notification period is short, it is easy to execute the numerical effect α in which the numbers are displayed one after another at a fast interval, and in the case of "30 seconds" where the notification period is long, it is slow. It may be configured not to execute the numerical effect β in which the numbers are displayed one after another at intervals.

Further, for example, the range of the numbers appearing in the numerical effect may be different depending on the type of the notification period. Further, for example, the presence / absence of the numerical effect and the allocation of the type of the numerical effect may be different depending on the notification mode (rectangular display, elliptical display, rhombus display) of the notification effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 105IWS110). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 105IWS111).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the staging control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, and an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts) is executed (step 105IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 105IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Further, in this feature unit 105IW, a super reach effect or a story reach effect (a reach effect that displays an image in which a series of stories develops) is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. When a variation pattern including the super reach effect is specified in the command, the process table including the super reach effect is selected in step 105IWS110, and the processes of step 105IWS112 and step 105IWS205 described later are executed according to the selected process table. By doing so, the super reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

When a variation pattern including a story reach effect is specified in the variation pattern command, a process table including the story reach effect is selected in step 105IWS110, and step 105IWS112 and step 105IWS205 described later are described according to the selected process table. By executing the process, the story reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As already described, in this feature unit 105IW, there are cases where it is controlled to a 16-round jackpot gaming state and cases where it is controlled to a 4-round jackpot gaming state, but the super reach effect is out of the question. In addition to being feasible when it becomes a big hit, it is executed in both the case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of 16 rounds and the case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of 4 rounds. There is. On the other hand, the story reach effect can be executed when it is out of the game, and when it becomes a big hit, it may be executed only when it is controlled to the big hit game state of 16 rounds, and the big hit game state of 4 rounds. When controlled by, the story reach effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 105IWS113).

Then, the staging control CPU 120 sets the value of the staging control process flag to a value corresponding to the staging process (step S172) during variable display (step 105IWS114).

FIG. 20-9 is a flowchart showing the variable display during staging process (step S172) in the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 105IWS201) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 105IWS202). When the process timer times out (step 105IWS203), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 105IWS204). Further, the control state for the effector is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 105IWS205).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the notification start timing of the notification period when the execution of the notification effect is determined (step 105IWS206). Whether or not the notification start timing of the notification period has been reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 105IWS113. If the notification start timing of the notification period is reached, the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification display of the notification period on the image display device 5 and controls to start the notification effect (step 105IWS207). For example, if the notification period is determined to be "10 seconds" and the notification mode is determined to be rectangular, the notification display including the character display of "10 seconds later?" Is displayed in the rectangular display. Further, for example, when the notification period is determined to be "30 seconds" and the diamond display is determined as the notification mode, the notification display including the character display of "30 seconds later?" Is displayed in the diamond display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a notification period measurement timer for measuring the remaining time of the notification period (step 105IWS208). For example, if the notification period is determined to be "10 seconds", a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the notification period measurement timer in step 105IWS208. Further, for example, when the notification period is determined to be "20 seconds", a value corresponding to 20 seconds is set in the notification period measurement timer in step 105IWS208. Further, for example, when the notification period is determined to be "30 seconds", a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set in the notification period measurement timer in step 105IWS208.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the notification end timing of the notification period when the execution of the notification effect is determined (step 105IWS209). Whether or not the notification end timing of the notification period has been reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 105IWS113. If the notification end timing of the notification period is reached, the effect control CPU 120 erases the notification display of the notification period displayed on the image display device 5 and controls to end the notification effect (step 105IWS210).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the execution timing of the numerical effect when the execution of the numerical effect is determined (step 105IWS211). It should be noted that whether or not the execution timing of the numerical effect is set can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 105IWS113. It should be noted that the execution timing of the numerical effect shall arrive between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the advance notice effect. If it is the execution timing of the numerical effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the numerical effect (step 105IWS212).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the notification period measurement timer is a value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second after the execution of the notification effect (step 105IWS213). .. If the value of the notification period measurement timer is a value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second (that is, if the remaining time of the notification period is 3 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the remaining time display according to the remaining time of the notification period (step 105IWS214). For example, if the remaining time is 3 seconds, the character display of "3 seconds remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display. Further, for example, when the remaining time is 2 seconds, the character display of "remaining 2 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display. Further, for example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the character display of "1 second remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the notification period measurement timer has timed out after the notification effect is executed (step 105IWS215). If the notification period measurement timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the advance notice effect (step 105IWS216). For example, if the execution of the advance notice effect A is decided, the advance notice effect A is executed, if the execution of the advance notice effect B is decided, the advance notice effect B is executed, and if the execution of the advance notice effect C is decided. If there is, the notice effect C is executed.

The feature portion 105IW may decide not to execute the notification effect when the advance notice effect is executed. However, when the notification effect is not executed, for example, the variable time timer set in step 105IWS113 may be determined. By confirming the value, whether it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect A during high-speed fluctuation, the execution timing of the advance notice effect B when the reach is established, and the execution timing of the advance notice effect C after the reach is established. It suffices to determine whether it is, and to execute the notice staging A to C.

Then, if the variable time timer has timed out (step 105IWS217), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 105IWS218).

FIG. 20-10 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first controls to stop and display the determined stop symbols (missing symbols, big hit symbols, small hit symbols) (step 105IWS301).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 105IWS301 (Y in step 105IWS302), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the story reach effect is executed in the variable display that ends this time (step 105IWS303). Whether or not the story reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by checking the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the gate passage waiting effect including the ending effect (step 105IWS304).

The "ending effect" is an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the ending part of the story in the story reach effect. By executing the process of steps 105IWS312, 105IWS404 described later according to the process table selected in step 105IWS304, the ending effect is executed in the gate passage waiting state, and the story reach effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol is changed to the gate passage waiting state. A series of story productions are performed over the ending production inside.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 105IWS305). Whether or not the player is in the high base state can be determined, for example, by checking the effect control command that can specify the game state received from the game control microcomputer 100. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background screen of the image display device 5 is configured so that the game state can also be specified (for example, the probability change state background specification command capable of specifying the probability change state, the time reduction state background specification capable of specifying the time reduction state). Based on the command, the normal state background specification command that can specify the normal state), the probabilistic state background specification command, and the time saving state background specification command, it may be determined that the high base state is in progress. ..

If it is in the high base state, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311. Unless it is in the high base state (that is, in the low base state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to superimpose and display the caution display (step 105IWS306). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to superimpose and display a character display such as "(caution) movie ends when passing through a gate" as a caution display. Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311.

As described above, the feature portion 105IW executes the ending effect for the story reach effect in the gate waiting state, but when the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 in the low base state, the ending effect is executed. It is configured to end the production. Therefore, if the game ball is passed through the operating gate 105IWS001 early in the low base state, the ending effect ends in the middle and cannot be seen until the end. Therefore, in the low base state, by executing the process of step 105IWS306 and displaying the caution display, if the game ball is passed through the operating gate 105IWS001 early, the ending effect will end in the middle. It makes it possible for the player to pay attention to this.

Unless the story reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect has been executed in the variable display ending this time (step 105IWS307). Whether or not the super reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by checking the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. When the super reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the gate passage waiting effect including the promotion display (step 105IWS308). The "promotion display" is a display for urging the actuating gate 105IW001 to aim at the right side of the game area to pass the game ball. For example, as a promotion display, a character display such as "right-handed" is superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a gate passage waiting time measurement timer for measuring the elapsed time from the gate passage waiting state (step 105IWS309). In this example, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the gate passage waiting time measurement timer. Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311.

Unless the super reach effect is executed (for example, when a big hit is obtained only by the normal reach), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal gate passage waiting effect (step 105IWS310). As the normal gate passage waiting effect, for example, the promotion display may be performed in the same manner as when the super reach effect is executed, or the display size is larger than that when the super reach effect is executed. A small promotion display (for example, a right-handed display with a small display size) may be performed. Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 105IWS311), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 105IWS312).

Next, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 105IWS313), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting effect process (step 105IWS314). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the small hit medium effect unless the big hit symbol is derived and displayed (N in step 105IWS313), that is, if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. The value is updated according to the process (step 105IWS315).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 105IWS301 (Y in step 105IWS316), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 105IWS317). Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311.

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 105IW316), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step S170). Update to (step 105IWS318).

Further, in this feature unit 105IW, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure hit waiting process (step S173), the process shifts to the gate passage waiting effect process instead of immediately shifting to the big hit middle effect process (step S176). do.

20-11 and 20-12 are flowcharts showing the gate passage waiting effect processing. In the gate passage waiting effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 105IWS401). When the process timer times out (step 105IWS402), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 105IWS403). Further, the control state for the effector is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 105IWS404).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 105IWS405). If the jackpot start designation command has been received (that is, if the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the story reach effect has been executed with the variable display that has ended this time. (Step 105 IWS406). Whether or not the story reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by checking the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

When the story reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 105IWS407). Whether or not the player is in the high base state can be determined, for example, by checking the effect control command that can specify the game state received from the game control microcomputer 100. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background screen of the image display device 5 is configured so that the game state can also be specified (for example, the probability change state background specification command capable of specifying the probability change state, the time reduction state background specification capable of specifying the time reduction state). Based on the command, the normal state background specification command that can specify the normal state), the probabilistic state background specification command, and the time saving state background specification command, it may be determined that the high base state is in progress. ..

In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the ending effect (step 105IWS408). If it is not in the high base state (that is, in the low base state), the process table corresponding to the normal jackpot medium effect is selected (step 105IWS409). Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS413.

By executing the processes of steps 105IWS406 to S409, in this feature portion 105IW, if the feature portion 105IW is in the high base state, the ending effect continues even if the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IWS001 and shifts to the big hit game state. Is executed. On the other hand, in the low base state, the ending effect is terminated based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 105IWS001.

In this feature unit 105IW, by executing the processes of steps 105IWS407 to S409, whether to end or continue the ending effect triggered by the passage of the game ball of the operating gate 105IWS001 depending on whether or not it is in the high base state. Is different, or whether or not the caution display is displayed depending on whether or not the high base state is displayed by executing the processes of steps 105IWS305 to S306, while the high base state is set. Regardless of whether or not, the story reach production itself shows the same case, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute different story reach effects depending on whether it is in the high base state or the low base state. In this case, for example, the position as the reach is the same story reach production in the case of the high base state and the case of the low base state, but the production content of the story reach production is different (for example, different stories). (For example, the effect of the effect content of the above) and the variation time (for example, the effect period of the reach) may be different.

Unless the story reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect has been executed in the variable display ended this time (step 105IWS410). Whether or not the super reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by checking the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. When the super reach effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 is used for a big hit medium effect including a roulette effect according to the big hit type (in this example, whether it is a 16 round big hit or a 4 round big hit). Select the corresponding process table (step 105IWS411). Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS413.

By executing the processes of steps 105IWS410 to S411, the feature portion 105IW executes the super reach effect, derives and displays the jackpot symbol, and then the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 to start the jackpot game. Occasionally, a roulette effect is executed to incite whether it is a 16-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot, and if the final 16-round jackpot is reached, it must be a 16-round jackpot. Is notified, and if it is a big hit of 4 rounds, it is notified that it is a big hit of 4 rounds.

Unless the super reach effect is executed (for example, when a big hit is obtained only by the normal reach), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal big hit medium effect (step 105IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS413.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 105IWS413), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 105IWS414).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 105IWS415).

If the jackpot start designation command has not been received in step 105IWS405 (that is, if the game ball has not yet passed through the operating gate 105IW001), the effect control CPU 120 has a value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer of 0. Confirm whether or not (step 105IWS416). If the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the gate passage waiting time measurement timer value (step 105IWS417), and the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer after the subtraction is 0. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 105IWS418).

If the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot of 16 rounds (step 105IWS419). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 16-round jackpot is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area specifies a 16-round jackpot. It can be determined by this.

If it is a 16-round jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the 16R jackpot notification effect that notifies that the 16-round jackpot has occurred (step 105IWS420). In step 105IWS420, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the 16R jackpot notification effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the 16R jackpot notification effect, and executes the 16R jackpot notification effect. Decide whether or not. In this example, it is determined that the 16R jackpot notification effect is executed with a probability of 50%.

When it is decided to execute the 16R jackpot notification effect (Y in step 105IWS421), the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table according to the 16R jackpot notification effect (step 105IWS422), and restarts the process timer. Start (step 105IWS423).

16 rounds if 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 105IW001 after the super reach effect is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by executing the processes of steps 105IWS416 to S423. In the case of a big hit, a 16R big hit notification effect may be executed by lottery.

Next, an example of the effect when the notification effect, the numerical effect, and the advance notice effect are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the effect when the notification effect, the numerical effect, and the advance notice effect are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the staging screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, it is assumed that the advance notice effect C is determined to be executed at the start of the variable display (see step 105 IWS103) and the notification effect is to be executed (see step 105 IWS103). Step 105 IWS 105). Further, it is assumed that "30 seconds" is determined as the notification period in the notification effect (see step 105IWS107) and the diamond-shaped display is determined as the notification mode (see step 105IWS108). Further, it is assumed that the execution of the numerical effect is decided (see step 105IWS109).

As shown in FIG. 20-13 (A), when the execution timing of the notification effect is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is started (in this example, the timing is 30 seconds before the execution of the advance notice effect C). ), As shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), the notification effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), a case is shown in which the notification effect is executed by displaying the notification display 105IW003 including the character display of "30 seconds later?" In the diamond-shaped display in the image display device 5. ing.

Next, at the end timing of the notification effect, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (C), the notification display 105IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily erased, and the notification effect is ended.

Next, when the execution timing of the numerical effect is reached, the numerical effect is executed as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D). In the example shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), the image display device 5 displays an image in which numerical values such as “2”, “5”, and “3” pop out, and the speakers 8L and 8R display “2”. , "5", "3" and the like are shown to perform a numerical effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), there is a case where the variation display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the numerical effect. Has been done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "7"), and after the reach is established, the advance notice effect C is further executed. When there are 3 seconds remaining until the timing, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (E), the image display device 5 displays the remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is “3 seconds”. FIG. 20-14 (E) shows a case where the character display 105IW004 of "remaining 3 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display. When there are 2 seconds remaining until the execution timing of the advance notice effect C in order thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (F), the image display device 5 displays the remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is "2 seconds". .. FIG. 20-14 (F) shows a case where the character display 105IW005 of "remaining 2 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display. Further, when the remaining time is 1 second until the execution timing of the advance notice effect C, the image display device 5 displays the remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is "1 second" as shown in FIG. 20-14 (G). .. FIG. 20-14 (G) shows a case where the character display 105IW006 of "remaining 1 second" is displayed as the remaining time display.

In addition, in this example, when the notification effect is executed, the case where the remaining time display as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E) to (G) is always displayed is shown, but only in such an aspect. However, even if the notification effect is executed, the remaining time may not be displayed and the advance notice effect may be executed as it is. Further, even if it is configured to have both a pattern in which the notice effect is executed after the remaining time display is displayed after the notification effect is executed, and a pattern in which the notice effect is executed as it is without displaying the remaining time. good.

Then, when the execution timing of the advance notice effect C is reached, the advance notice effect C is executed as shown in FIG. 20-14 (H). In the example shown in FIG. 20-14 (H), the case where the advance notice effect C is executed by displaying the image of the character 105IW010 corresponding to the advance notice effect C on the image display device 5 is shown. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (H), there is a case where the variation display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the advance notice effect. Has been done.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where the advance notice effect C is executed is shown, but when the advance notice effect A is executed, for example, during high-speed fluctuation before the reach is established, FIG. The advance notice effect A is executed by displaying the image of the character corresponding to the advance notice effect A in the same manner as in 20-14 (H). Further, when the advance notice effect B is executed, the advance notice effect B is executed by displaying an image of the character corresponding to the advance notice effect B in a manner similar to that of FIG. 20-14 (H), for example, when the reach is established. Will be done.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where "30 seconds" is notified as the notification period is shown, but the case where "10 seconds" or "20 seconds" is notified as the notification period is shown. , The notification effect is executed by displaying the notification display including the character display of "10 seconds later?" Or "20 seconds later?" In a manner similar to that of FIG. 20-13 (B).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where the diamond-shaped display is determined as the notification mode is shown, but when the rectangular display or the elliptical display is determined as the notification mode, FIG. 20-13 ( The notification effect is executed by displaying a notification display including a character display such as "30 seconds later?" In the rectangular display or the elliptical display in the same manner as in B).

Next, an example of the effect when the story reach effect and the ending effect are executed will be described. 20-15 to 20-17 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the effect when the story reach effect and the ending effect are executed. In addition, in FIGS. 20-15 to 20-17, the staging screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

In the example shown in FIGS. 20-15 to 20-17, the process table including the story reach effect is selected and selected in step 105IWS110 based on the reception of the variation pattern command for specifying the variation pattern including the story reach effect. It is assumed that the processes of step 105IWS112 and step 105IWS205 are executed according to the process table.

As shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), after starting the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbol (in this example, It is assumed that the reach is established by displaying the stop with the symbol "7").

Next, when the execution timing of the story reach effect is reached, the story reach effect is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-15 (C). In this example, as the story reach effect, the effect of the racing car A105IW011, the racing car B105IW012, and the racing car C105IW013 appearing and racing is executed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-15 (C), when the story reach effect is started, a case is shown in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

Next, when the fluctuation time is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 20-15 (D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-15 (D), the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Next, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, when the state shifts to the gate passage waiting state, the image display device 5 is shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E), (F) and 20-17 (E), (F). (See step 105 IWS 304). In this example, out of the three racing cars 105IW011 to 013, the ending effect is executed so that the racing car C105IW013 finally wins the race. In this example, after the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 20-15 (C) and 20-15 (D), FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F) and FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F) are shown. When shifting to the ending production, it is assumed that each process table is configured so that the production content is smoothly connected from the story reach production to the ending production.

Further, in this case, when the gaming state is in the low base state, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F), as a caution display, in the image display device 5, "(Caution) at the gate passage". A character display 105IW014 such as "End movie" is displayed (see N in step 105IWS305 and step 105IWS036). On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the high base state, the caution display is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 20-17 (E) and 20-17 (F) (see Y in step 105IWS305).

Next, when the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 in the gate waiting state, the big hit game is started, and when the game state is in the low base state, the ending is as shown in FIG. 20-16 (G). The production is finished (see N in step 105IWS407 and step 105IWS409). On the other hand, when the game state is in the high base state, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (G), the ending effect is continued even if the big hit game is started (see Y in step 105IWS407 and step 105IWS408). .. In this case, for example, after the big hit game is started, the image of the winning run after the race may be displayed as a continuation of the ending effect, or the image of the goal scene may be repeatedly displayed.

When the game state is in the low base state, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 105IW001, as shown in FIG. 20-16 (G), the ending effect is finished and the big hit game is played. The production during the round of is started. On the other hand, when the game state is in the high base state, even if the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (G), the ending effect continues even if the big hit game is started. However, when the image reproduction such as this winning run is finished, the ending effect is ended and the effect during the round of the jackpot game of the same aspect is started (the effect during the round of a different aspect is started). You may do so).

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 and 20-17, the jackpot symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the ending effect or after the start of the jackpot game. The case is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 20-16, in this feature portion 105IW, when the gaming state is in the low base state, the ending effect ends when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 and the big hit game is started. If the game ball is passed through the actuating gate 105IW001 too quickly, the final part of the ending effect (for example, the goal scene) cannot be seen. Therefore, in this example, when the player is in the low base state, the caution display 105IW014 is displayed so that the player can be careful.

In addition, in FIGS. 20-16 and 20-17, a right-handed display (display prompting the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 105IW001) may be further performed during the execution of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the case of a low base state, a character display such as "right-handed" is displayed at a medium display size in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F), while a high base state is displayed. In the case of the inside, inconspicuous modes such as displaying a character display such as "right-handed" or displaying an arrow pointing to the right in a small display size in FIGS. 20-17 (E) and 20-17 (F). It may be configured to display right-handed characters.

Next, an example of the effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described. 20-18 to 20-20 are explanatory views for explaining an example of the effect when the super reach effect is executed. In addition, in FIGS. 20-18 to 20-20, the staging screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

In the example shown in FIGS. 20-18 to 20-20, the process table including the super reach effect is selected and selected in step 105IWS110 based on the reception of the variation pattern command for specifying the variation pattern including the super reach effect. It is assumed that the processes of step 105IWS112 and step 105IWS205 are executed according to the process table.

As shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), after starting the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbol (in this example, It is assumed that the reach is established by displaying the stop with the symbol "7").

Next, when it is time to execute the super reach effect, the image display device 5 starts the super reach effect as shown in FIG. 20-18 (C). In this example, as a super reach effect, an effect in which a friendly character 105IW015 and an enemy character 105IW016 appear to perform a battle is executed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-18 (C), when the super reach effect is started, a case is shown in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

Then, when the fluctuation time is stopped, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-18 (D), the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Next, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, when the state shifts to the gate passage waiting state, the promotion display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-19 (E) (see step 105IWS308). In this example, as a promotion display, the character display 105IW017 of "right-handed" is displayed, and a display prompting the operation gate 105IW001 to aim at the right side of the game area to pass the game ball is performed. It is shown.

Next, when the game ball passes through the operating gate 105IW001 in the gate waiting state, the image display device 5 executes a roulette effect at the start of the big hit game as shown in FIG. 20-19 (F) (see step 105IWS411). .. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (F), the image 105IW018 of the roulette is displayed, and by rotating the roulette, an effect of inciting whether it is a 16-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot is executed. Will be done.

In this example, it is assumed that the jackpot is 16 rounds, and as shown in FIG. 20-19 (G), the ball enters the square of "16R" in the roulette effect, and as shown in FIG. 20-19 (H). , It is notified that the jackpot is 16 rounds, and it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (E), although the promotion display 105IW017 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (F), it operates even after 10 seconds have passed. It is assumed that the game ball has not passed through the gate 105IW001. In this case, if it is a 16-round jackpot game, the presence or absence of the 16R jackpot notification effect is determined by lottery (see step 105IWS420), and if the execution of the 16R jackpot notification effect is determined, FIG. As shown in G), the 16R jackpot notification effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 105IWS422). In this example, a predetermined character 105IW019 appears as a 16R jackpot notification effect, and a case where the character display of "16R jackpot!" Is displayed as a line of the character 105IW019 is shown.

By executing the 16R jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 20-20 (G), in this example, when the 16R jackpot notification effect is executed, it is determined that the jackpot is 16 rounds. On the other hand, there are cases where the 16R jackpot notification is not executed even after 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 105IW001. In this case, there are cases where the jackpot is 16 rounds and 4 rounds. There is a possibility of both a big hit and a big hit.

As described above, according to the feature unit 105IW, a plurality of types of suggestive effects (in this example, advance notice effects A to C) suggesting that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state). Is feasible. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of suggestion effects is executed, a predetermined period until the suggestion effect is executed (in this example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds"). ”) Can be executed, and after the predetermined period is notified in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

For example, when the notification period is continuously displayed from the notification of the notification period to the execution timing of the advance notice effect (for example, when the countdown is displayed), the execution timing of the advance notice effect can be clearly recognized. The effect cannot be enhanced sufficiently. On the other hand, in this feature unit 105IW, since the notification of the notification period cannot be recognized before the notification period elapses, it is possible to make it impossible to clearly grasp the elapse of the notification period, and the player It is possible to realize a game-like effect of counting the time until the notification period elapses in the mind and waiting, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the notification effect is executed.

In this example, the case of erasing the notification display displayed on the image display device 5 is shown as the case of "making the notification of a predetermined period unrecognizable", but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the display screen of the image display device 5 is blacked out by executing another effect such as a blackout effect while the notification display is being displayed, the notification display becomes unrecognizable. good. Further, for example, the notification display may be unrecognizable by the movable member provided in the gaming machine operating to hide the notification display, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, as "before the predetermined period elapses", in this example, when the notification display is displayed, the notification display is erased relatively immediately to make it invisible. Not limited. For example, the notification display may be continuously displayed for a relatively long period of time, and the notification display may be erased for a moment for a relatively short period before the execution timing of the advance notice effect to make it invisible. Further, for example, even if the countdown display is performed until the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached, and the countdown display is erased for a moment before the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached, the countdown display is made invisible. good. As such, various aspects can be considered as "before the predetermined period elapses".

Further, in this example, the case where the "suggestion effect" is a preview effect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a pseudo-ream or reach effect may be executed as a "suggestion effect", and a notification effect may be executed before the pseudo-ream or reach effect. Further, for example, when an effect having the same effect mode as the so-called look-ahead zone effect is configured to be executable as an effect to be executed during the variable display, the effect having the same effect mode as the look-ahead zone effect is referred to as a "suggestion effect". It may be configured to execute and execute the notification effect before the effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, it is possible to execute at a plurality of timings during variable display according to the type of suggestion effect (in this example, the advance notice effect A is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and the advance notice effect B is reach. It is executed when it is established, and the advance notice effect C is executed after the reach is established). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, when a long period as a predetermined period is notified in the notification effect, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a short period is notified as a predetermined period (FIG. 20). -6). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to which period is notified as a predetermined period.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, the notification effect can be executed by a plurality of types of notification modes (rectangular display, elliptical display, and rhombus display in this example), and the same type of suggestion effect is executed and the notification effect is performed. Even when the same period is notified as a predetermined period in the above, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the type of notification mode of the notification effect (see FIG. 20-7). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to which notification mode is used to execute the notification effect.

In this example, as the notification mode, the case where the shape of the notification display such as the rectangular display, the elliptical display, and the diamond-shaped display is different is shown, but the notification mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a notification mode, the display colors of the notification display (for example, red, green, blue, and rainbow colors) may be configured to be different. Further, for example, when the character is displayed together with the notification display, a different character may be displayed as the notification mode, or the voice of the character may be different.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, after the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable, the timing immediately before the lapse of the predetermined period is notified that the timing is immediately before the lapse of the predetermined period (this present). In the example, the remaining time display shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E) to (G) is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

In this example, the "timing immediately before the lapse of a predetermined period" is a timing in which the time from the lapse of the notification period to the execution timing of the advance notice effect is extremely short (in this example, 3 seconds before and 2 seconds before). Before, 1 second ago). Not limited to the one shown by the feature unit 105IW, if the timing is such that the player recognizes that the time until the advance notice effect is short, the remaining time is displayed at a timing such as 5 seconds before. You may.

Further, in this example, when the notification period elapses, the advance notice effect is executed, and the remaining time is displayed from 3 seconds before the notification period elapses (for example, the notification period is "30 seconds"). In this case, the remaining time display is started when 27 seconds have elapsed, and the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached when exactly 30 seconds have elapsed), and the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the notification period is "30 seconds", the remaining time display is started when 30 seconds have elapsed, and the advance notice effect is executed when the remaining time display is finished after 33 seconds have elapsed. It may be configured.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (in this example, a numerical effect) using a numerical value after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable and before the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

For example, if a notification effect is executed to notify the notification period of "10 seconds", "20 seconds", or "30 seconds", the player is counted for 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds in his or her mind. If this happens, there is a risk that the player will recognize the execution timing of the advance notice effects A to C. Therefore, in this feature unit 105IW, after the notification effect is executed, the numerical effect is executed before the execution timing of the advance notice effects A to C, and the period until the advance notice effects A to C are executed in the numerical effect. Is confusing the player by displaying irrelevant numbers or outputting them by voice, making it difficult to count the time until the advance notice effects A to C are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the execution timings of the advance notice effects A to C, to enhance the unexpectedness of the advance notice effect execution, and to enhance the effect when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible.

In this feature section 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), in the "numerical effect", for example, "2"-> "5"-> "3"-> ... By notifying immovably (randomly), it is an effect that confuses the player and makes it difficult to count the time until the advance notice effects A to C are executed. It should be noted that, as long as it can confuse the player, various modes can be considered as "numerical effect", not limited to such a mode. For example, as a "numerical effect", numerical values are notified in an order different from the countdown (for example, remaining time display) in the notification effect (for example, in the notification effect, "30" → "29" → "28" → ... In contrast to the notification in descending order, in the numerical effect, the player may be confused by notifying in ascending order as "2" → "3" → "4" → ... For example, in the notification effect, "1" → ... → "28" → "29" → "30" is notified in ascending order, whereas in the numerical effect, "4" → "3" → "2". It may be confusing to the player by notifying the player in descending order. For example, as a "numerical effect", at a timing different from the internal numerical update timing in the notification effect. By executing the effect of updating the numerical value, the player may be configured to disturb the timing of counting the numbers in his / her mind. Further, for example, the notification cycle of the numerical value in the “numerical effect” may be performed. Is irregularly changed (for example, "2" to "5" is updated in 0.5 seconds, and "5" to "3" is updated in 2 seconds), which confuses the player. May be.

Further, in this feature unit 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), when the "numerical effect" is executed by displaying the numerical value in the image display device 5 and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as a "numerical effect", a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED may be made to emit light at a numerical update timing, or may be vibrated (for example, a motor of an operation button may be operated to vibrate, or an effect for directing may be used. By vibrating (or making it vibrate), the player may be configured to break the rhythm counting in his / her mind and be confused. Further, for example, the player may be confused only by the light emission and the vibration operation of the light emitting body without displaying the numerical value.

It should be noted that the feature unit 105IW has shown a case where the player is prevented from easily recognizing the execution timings of the advance notice effects A to C by executing the numerical effect, but the case is limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, even if a predetermined effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo-ream) whose mode changes stepwise by the time the predetermined period elapses after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable, the predetermined effect can be executed. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the stepwise change of the mode and the player from easily recognizing the execution timing of the advance notice effects A to C. It is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the execution, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

The "step-up notice effect" is a notice effect that is executed in a manner in which the effect changes stepwise from the first stage to the plurality of stages. Generally, when the step-up notice effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher when the effect is changed to more stages. Further, the "pseudo-ream" is a re-variable display in which the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is executed again between the start of the variable display and the derivation display of the display result. It is a variable display mode that is executed multiple times or multiple times. In general, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher when more revariable displays are executed.

In addition, when executing the step-up notice effect or pseudo-ream, the step-up notice effect or pseudo-ream is started before the notification period is notified, and the step-up notice effect or a part of the pseudo-ream sets the notification period. It may be included from the notification to the execution of the advance notice effect.

Further, according to this feature unit 105IW, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation gate 105IW001 is played. Based on the fact that the ball has passed), it is possible to control an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a story reach effect and a super reach effect) that suggests that the control is controlled in an advantageous state, and when the specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, the specific effect is specified. A special effect related to the specific effect (in this example, the ending effect shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F) and FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F)) is executed until the condition is satisfied. It is possible (in this example, when the story reach effect is executed, the ending effect is executed while waiting for the gate to pass). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, the first specific effect (in this example, the story reach effect) and the second specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect) can be executed as the specific effect. Further, when the first specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, a special effect related to the first specific effect (in this example, FIGS. 20-16 (E)) until the specific condition is satisfied. , (F) and the ending effect shown in FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F)) (in this example, when the story reach effect is executed, the ending effect is performed while waiting for the gate to pass. When the second specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, a predetermined effect not related to the second specific effect (in this example, FIGS. 20-19) until the specific condition is satisfied. (E) and the display of the promotion display shown in FIGS. 20-20 (E)) can be executed (in this example, when the super reach effect is executed, the promotion display is displayed in the gate waiting state. ). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

Further, according to this feature unit 105IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, a 16-round jackpot and a 4-round jackpot). Further, after the specific condition is satisfied, the notification effect (in this example, the roulette effect shown in FIGS. 20-19 (F) and (G)) for notifying the type of the advantageous state can be executed, and the first specific effect is If it is controlled to an advantageous state after being executed, the notification effect is not executed (in this example, the roulette effect is executed after the game ball of the operation gate 105IW001 passes only when the super reach effect is executed, and the story reach effect is performed. If is executed, the roulette effect will not be executed). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

In particular, in this feature section 105IW, the super reach effect can be executed in the case of an outlier, and in the case of a big hit, it can be executed in both the 16-round jackpot and the 4-round jackpot. On the other hand, the story reach effect can be executed when it is out of the question, and when it becomes a big hit, it can be executed only when it becomes a big hit of 16 rounds, so that the story reach effect is executed. In such a case, the waste of the production can be eliminated by not executing the roulette production. For example, the story of the story reach production can be continuously shown by continuing the ending production in the high base state.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, the execution of the special effect is terminated based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and the execution of the special effect is terminated based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the execution of the special effect. The end notification (in this example, the caution display 105IW014 shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F)) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to call attention to the fact that the special effect is unintentionally terminated, and the effect of controlling the effect to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the situation of deterioration.

In this example, a case is shown in which a caution display is displayed throughout the execution of the ending effect while waiting for the gate to pass, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the caution display may be displayed only for a part of the period during which the ending effect is being executed, or conversely, the caution display is started immediately before the ending effect is started (for example, 1 to 3 seconds before). It may be configured as follows.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, the special effect is executed during the advantageous state even after the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, when the gaming state is in the high base state, FIG. 20-17 (G). ), Even if the game ball passes through the actuating gate 105IW001 and the big hit game is started, the ending effect is executed throughout the big hit game). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 105IW, a promotion effect for encouraging the establishment of the specific condition in the period from the time when the specific display result is derived and displayed until the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, FIG. 20-19 (E). ) And the display of the promotion display shown in FIG. 20-20 (E)). Further, the advantageous state-related effect regarding the advantageous state to be controlled based on the elapse of a predetermined period without satisfying the specific condition after the execution of the promotion effect is started (in this example, FIG. 20-20 (G)). The 16R jackpot notification effect shown in 1) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed. In particular, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the period from when the specific display result is derived and displayed until the specific condition is satisfied.

(Explanation of Modification of Feature 105IW)
In this feature section 105IW, although the story reach effect and the ending effect are executed as a series of effects, the process tables are switched between during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of waiting for the gate to pass, and after the start of the big hit game. Although the case of executing these series of effects is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the story reach effect and the ending effect may be configured to be executed from the variable display of the decorative symbol to the state of waiting for the passage of the gate (further, over the big hit game) using one moving image data. Hereinafter, a modified example of executing the story reach effect and the ending effect using one moving image data will be described.

FIG. 20-21 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the modified example. In this modification, in the variable display effect processing, the processing of steps 105IWS220 and S221 is executed in addition to the processing shown in FIGS. 20-9.

In this modification, in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the story reach effect (step 105IWS220). Whether or not it is the start timing of the story reach effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 105IWS113. If it is the start timing of the story reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the moving image reproduction of the story reach effect using the moving image data in the image display device 5 (step 105IWS221).

After that, the super reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the video data for which the video playback was started in step 105IWS221, and even after the gate passage waiting state is reached, the gate passage waiting state is in progress based on the video data. (Furthermore, if the base is high, the ending effect is executed even after the big hit game starts). Therefore, in this modification, the processing of step 105IWS304 and the processing of step 105IWS408 are unnecessary.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 20-21, the specific effect and the special effect are executed using one effect data (in this example, one moving image data). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of controlling the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 105IW (including the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 20-21) can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when the advance notice effects A to C shown by the feature unit 105IW, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advance notice effects A to C, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect. Occasionally, the titles corresponding to the advance notice effects A to C, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect may be configured to be able to be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105 IWS216) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, advance notice effects A to C) and a plurality of types of suggestion effects. When any of the suggestion effects is executed, a notification effect (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") for notifying a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion effect is executed is executed. A notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 105IWS207) capable of executing the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B) is provided, and a predetermined period is notified in the notification effect. Later, before the predetermined period elapses, the notification of the predetermined period cannot be recognized (for example, the portion where step 105IWS210 is executed in the effect control CPU 120), and the title corresponding to the suggestion effect can be notified. The title notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 21-2 (for example). D), (F)) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the notification when the notification effect is executed, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, and the title corresponding to the suggestion effect. A title notification means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 21-). 2 (D), (F)) A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the feature portion 31AK of another form example will be described. FIG. 21-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21-1 (A), in this embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the display result is "loss" without the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode. -2, the variation pattern of reach loss where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "loss" PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 21-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 21-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 21-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title is notified by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled, and the staging effect is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of staging operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the staging operation in this embodiment will be described. The following staging operation is executed by the staging control CPU 120 executing the staging control process process based on the staging control command transmitted from the main board 11. 21-2 and 21-3 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation in this embodiment. FIG. 21-2 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 21-2 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 21-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 21-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 21-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. In addition, although FIG. 21-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 21-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 21-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, and in the case of a reach with a low jackpot reliability, the super is announced. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach production.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expectation degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case because the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the deciding effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 21-2 and 21-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character resident during the variable display, and the display related to the mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 21-4. As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 21-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the staging operation example shown in FIG. 21-2 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 21-5 (D) and 21-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21-5 (A) to 21-5, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expected degree suggestion effect becomes various and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

21-5 (G) to 21-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (A) to 21-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of Super Reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 21-5 (J) and 21-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 21-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 21-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive production) may be made different in the production mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation degree. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK060 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 21-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 21-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 21-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B) in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's line (for example, the display color of the line) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in FIG. 21-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and this order (ascending order) is provided. ), The reliability of the big hit is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 21-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible staging modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible staging modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (the ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 21-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

21-10 and 21-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 21-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 21-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 21-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 21-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is in the center portion as shown in FIG. 21-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed, and a display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 21-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

In the staging operation examples shown in FIGS. 21-10 and 21-11, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach staging shown in FIGS. 21-10 and 21-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 21-8.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 21-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 21-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 21-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 21-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 21-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 21-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 21-12 (a) and 21-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 21-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 21-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 21-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 21-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 21-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 21-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 21-8 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 22-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the staging control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 22-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 22-3, it is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is promoted. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22-3 and 22-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with the display monitor 21TM029. , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for game ball detection, and is a game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22-3 and 22-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 22-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and is a main substrate. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 22-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entry area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio of consecutive ratios and the ratio of roles after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the main control board 11, the game control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. A predetermined operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 22-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-mentioned switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 22-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 22-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and the front surface of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the door frame and a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the sensor are connected, and various abnormalities are obtained based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Output a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control computer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize is set. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 22-22 and 22-34 to 36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including) 21TM160 is output. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 22-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 22-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066 are provided with a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22-2, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted / received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises an XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects a fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and gives a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

22-4 (A) to 22-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value as a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 22-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to 22-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. It is provided separately, and the big hit is determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, information on winning a game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls by winning (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input, and the number of fired balls is totaled. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls, is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). A certain role ratio (%) and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the sum of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the gaming ball fluctuates. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of game balls is a certain amount.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the winning of the game, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric role prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (electric chew), by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 is a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls. The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the prize balls If the total number is input and the total is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general prize ball, a first starting prize opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, and a special electric service. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total number of hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of gaming media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the bonus ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is close to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material, so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not obstructed by the heat radiation hole. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer equipped with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is used. Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1987/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. Since it is necessary to avoid the calculation with a decimal point when performing the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1987/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of bonus balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, since the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting light of a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins a prize for the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 22-5 (A) can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained by using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew merges. Based on this, the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be totaled.

Hereinafter, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the display of the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 22-3). On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the staging control board 12 is also provided.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 has a gate passing number counter, a first start winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. In this embodiment, a form in which the number of winnings of the large winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the large winning number counter is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first large winnings are obtained. The number of prizes in the first prize opening is separately provided with the first prize counter that counts the number of prizes in the mouth and the second prize counter that counts the number of prizes in the second prize. And the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be totaled individually, and the number of each of these winnings may be totaled to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 22-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate the clear switch 21TM052. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, which is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, and the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. Further, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 11 is provided with an RTC 106, and the current time can be detected by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 22-5 (A), the main board 11 is housed in the board case 21TM201. A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pin 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts against the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing seal 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The seal sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 22-5 (B). The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit has the aggregated setting values (1 to 6), and the RAM clear notification (“C”” that notifies that the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode is completed. ) Is displayed, the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit are displayed. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on 21TM029E. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the reciprocal ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters the 4th general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the 1st starting winning opening, the 2nd starting winning opening, and the 1st general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio and the base. The number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the outlet are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch to a fourth general winning port switch, and a discharge port switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal).

In this switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd general winning opening switch, the 3rd general winning opening switch, and the 4th general winning opening switch, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, and the 3rd general winning number counter. The value of the counter and the 4th general winning number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter the game ball into each approach area. The number (the number of winning games of the game ball to each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate aggregation program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the execution program. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in Fig. 22-6, the number of prize balls for each prize opening classified here is the prize balls by winning the general prize opening (1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening (sode)). ), 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting winning opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (to attacker) It is the number of prize balls of the prize ball). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls that have been driven. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting are totaled. The number of game ball winnings to the winning openings may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls for the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls for the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas consisting of a counter having a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, in the RAM 102, a ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and total cumulative combination ratios and ratios, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). It has a base storage area for storing. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls for each of the 10 sets and the total cumulative total of winning openings, and the 10 sets are equivalent. And, it is stored in the ratio combination storage area that stores the total total combination ratio and connection ratio. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio as an integer, a counter with a maximum of 1 byte can store the combination ratio and the connection ratio with a margin.

Further, in the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time are calculated. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter of up to 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 22-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 22-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area in the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; Of the same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area of the memory space (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment), and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-8, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (operation code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of ratio combinations are provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data having different starting addresses of the subroutines.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 22-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Characters are displayed, and the characters "7." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "b" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "b" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E may be used.
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is displayed by the display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 display when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term continuous ratio when the set value is "3", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first is 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first is 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "4".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "4", the first is 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "5".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", the first is 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "6".

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "6", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, a mode in which the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited thereto. In, among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases, only the numerical value of 1 or only the numerical value of any 2 may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, is calculated and the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. ..

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage of the total sum and total total storage area for 10 sets and the ratio and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and connection ratio of 10 sets and total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the numbers are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily erased and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 22-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weighting is performed until the staging control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, the CPU 103 performs initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc.) (step S21TM1050), and then performs the RAM 102. Set to the accessible state (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is set. This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052, which is input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in the state check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. .. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, the game machine that is the output source of these signals changes the settings based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command for designating that the setting change mode has been controlled as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is waited for (step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is accepted, the display control is executed in which the displayed setting value is incremented by 1 and returned to 1 after reaching 6.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is fixed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the confirmed set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated in step S21TM1160 (without being determined to be YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, and as a result, the set value of the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 22-13 described later.

If an OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 is set so that the set value can be confirmed. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal as the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). As a result, the game machine that is the output source of these signals changes the settings based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command for designating the control to the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the CPU 103 is described in FIG. 22- The process proceeds to the determination process of whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed in step S21TM1320 shown in 13.

When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 is a clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 22-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) Check the status of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 (step S21TM1310).

In the state check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executed the power failure detection process (see FIG. 22-14). Whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area is determined (step S21TM1320).

In this example, as a case where the process of this step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned off. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process shifts to the setting confirmation mode and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in RAM 102), and step S21TM1360. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for areas that may be initialized in the work area are set in the backup setting table. By the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, restricting member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of the output port. The area where the state is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on. The setting value storage area (the area where the fixed setting value is stored) is also included in the part that should not be initialized. Further, an area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base is stored for each set value is also included in a portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

In step S21TM1310, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or when backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), the initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Initialization of step S21TM1410 immediately without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, provided that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 based on the fact that was also OFF. Based on the case where the process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting is changed. Setting based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that the mode shifts to the confirmation mode and NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode is completed.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 before the power supply is stopped is cleared, and the initial value is set. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

Further, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag.

In this embodiment, a mode of shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode, provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed at the time of turning on the power (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, it may notify that the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 has initialized the game state or the like. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 22-19 and 22-21). Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals. That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process that controls the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In the example shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM1370 or step). S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as a lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, and 8R can be specified. , It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as the game effect lamp 9.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 22-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 22-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 is determined via the circuit 110 (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown). Based on the fact that the radio wave is detected, it is determined that the game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , 2nd start port switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning opening switch to 4th general winning opening switch When a detection signal is input, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal The prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays and monitors the winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating the winning information such as the winning ratio, the consecutive ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning ratio, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, the abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615, and if the abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed) in S21TM1615. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) in the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B. Allows you to set the tilting motion of one piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the staging control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced according to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning it off after that, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as the above and transmitting the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a clerk at the amusement park or the like performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this setting value). In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (C), the CPU 103 is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Every time an operation is detected, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed from 1 to 2 to 3 →. Updates are displayed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value "1") itself stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. It is changed (overwritten) to the numerical value (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (D), the CPU 103 enters the set value storage area of the RAM 102 based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value "1") is the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area. ) Is changed (overwritten), and the set value (set value "2" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is fixed (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Notification of completion of setting) (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area). Neither the stored setting value "2") nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the setting value "2" in this example) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in this embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state when the power is cut off, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. As a result, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clear processing is completed, the CPU 103 notifies the clerk of the amusement center that the RAM clear processing has been executed (RAM clear notification) by displaying "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A. (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the clerk at the amusement park or the like knows that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, the game is possible, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change mode of this embodiment, a mode of displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is exemplified as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value most advantageous for the player (“6” in this embodiment), or is the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

Further, the CPU 103 is associated with the end of the setting change mode, and after the RAM clear notification, the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to the fixed setting value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102). Each aggregated value such as ratio and base may be displayed. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set values).

If the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the setting value of the RAM 102 is due to the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk of the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). When the power is turned on in (when N is set in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the process of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value). "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A) (in this example, the setting value). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

In addition, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park, the first display unit is used. The numerical value displayed on 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park while the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example). Then, if the setting value "1") stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting). The setting value "1") stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the game hall or the like (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the process of step S21TM1320 or later, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to RAM clear unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the setting value "1" stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the setting value "1" in this example) is changed.

As shown above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is satisfied. ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The clerk of the amusement park turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on in order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the pachinko / pachislot clerk or the like can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or not to control any of them), and also perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute it.

Further, in this embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, if a clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, even if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on to switch to the setting confirmation mode, the game state remains. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement park side, the setting confirmation mode makes it possible to confirm the set value without any trouble.

Further, the CPU 103 has a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. corresponding to the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also possible to display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set values).

22-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 22-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the setting change mode, and FIG. 22-17 (2) is an image display when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (1), the start of the staging control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the staging control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being changed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being changed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have changed to the setting change mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting change mode, so that the setting can be changed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), other display information (for example, an effect symbol, a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

If the effect control CPU 120 is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) when the setting change mode command is received (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying that the setting change mode has been entered from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the staging control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or CPU103 in step S21TM1460). (Based on receiving the initialization command at power-on sent from the staging control board 12), the staging control CPU 120 identifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has terminated the setting change mode. It is possible to notify that fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting change completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting change mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the user is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-playable state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen is transmitted on the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (2), when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the staging control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the staging control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), for effect control based on receiving the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being confirmed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being confirmed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have switched to the setting confirmation mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), other display information (for example, an effect symbol, a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

If the effect control CPU 120 is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) when the setting confirmation mode command is received (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying the transition to the setting confirmation mode from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the staging control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step). The effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the fact that the S21TM1460 receives the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command at the time of power on, which is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has been terminated and notify that fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the user is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so that the setting confirmation mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-playable state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen is transmitted on the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 22-18 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 22-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the “sunny” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 22-18 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the “cloudy” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 22-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 22-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can store the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, and can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, it is stored in the image display device 5 together with a character (character of "BONUS end") notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 22-18 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (2), and FIG. 22-. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to perform the staging (ending staging), and decided to perform the setting suggestion staging (ending staging) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and moderate. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

FIG. 22-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted / received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 22-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and is output to the main board 11 with respect to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the circuit board has started up. Further, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal can be output by setting an initial value in the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically). Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 like the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 22-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set 8-bit data contents. Will be done.

The connection confirmation command is issued from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. It is a control command to be sent. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. It is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on a prize or the ball lending operation based on a ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" occurs. Is set to "1". Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. Further, when a ball out error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the third bit. Further, when a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is generated by the game control microcomputer. You can notify 100.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The content of the data of the prize ball number command is "5x (H)", that is, "0101xxxxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is released by the prize opening switch corresponding to the general prize opening 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the prize ball number command "01010111" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding prize opening switch, the prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls The prize ball number command "0101110" for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. The connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are configured so that either of them is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning or the like) is satisfied. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits by sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, the prize ball end command is not configured to set data indicating error information. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball operation ends, so even if the error information is not sent at that timing, the data indicating the error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command. Because it is possible to do so. In addition, data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error has occurred while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the prize ball operation. It is a control command to be sent based on what you have done. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the first bit. Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. Further, when a ball out error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the third bit. Further, when a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. At the same time, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similar to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by making the contents of the lower 4 bits different according to the error state (different predetermined bits). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any command is transmitted as a reception ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state in which an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state in which the prize ball operation is being executed.

The command during preparation of the prize ball is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the state that the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. be.

22-21 is a block diagram showing a control signal shown in FIG. 22-19, a signal line used for transmitting and receiving a control command shown in FIG. 22-20, and the like. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. To. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. Note that FIG. 22-21 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting the prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting the received ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

Next, transmission / reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball count command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 22-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-22, the game control microcomputer 100 is used to confirm whether or not the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is broken via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 22-23 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first makes necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is first set to prohibit interrupts (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the process of setting the built-in device register in step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the occurrence of interrupt, and the interrupt vector are set. Register setting is done. Then, the interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process that controls the payout means (at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding prize ball payout from the main board, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. Processing may be included.) Is executed.

In this embodiment, the interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt process based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, the interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. ..

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter to the prize ball unpaid number counter.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same processing as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initially set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied (step S21TM1920). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interrupting is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, interrupting is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, the loop process for monitoring the occurrence of timer interrupt is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 22-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte (referred to as an input state flag) of the RAM. be. When performing control based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 in the payout control process, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the input state. Check the status of the flag.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process that controls to pay out the lending balls in response to the ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and also controls to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). Further, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-ball error, prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in the error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 controls the display control process for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. Further, when the prize ball payout is completed, the control for turning off the prize ball LED21TM053 is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer include payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to send and receive various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 22-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100, receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Executes interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt processing. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interrupt processing at the time of reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid quantity counter.

FIG. 22-25 shows the ball lending executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication processing of. Here, as described later, as a method of restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method shown below.

First, (1) The first ball lending restriction method is a payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). Further, (2) the second ball lending restriction method is a PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 equipped with the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During the period, the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Further, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve turning off the power (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate amount of gaming media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described.

FIG. 22-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11 of the gaming machine, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal in the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on by the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13 (see FIG. 22-19). When the power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and the card unit 21TM050 is used. When the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loaned balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in the setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-27.

22-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into an ON state but turns it into an OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of the game medium. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 has a BRDY signal on the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes ball lending by turning off the PRDY signal or by not turning on the EXS signal. Prevent it from being done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in the setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-28. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. It shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. It shall be.

22-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 22-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that ball lending is not executed (ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. Based on the resumption of reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 has a BRDY signal on the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-28 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-28 can be applied. That is, the PRDY signal in the ON state is based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To switch to the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in the setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-29. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is said that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated as long as possible, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the gaming machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 22-29 shows the main board when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIGS. 22-29, it is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period during which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but turned off.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball is played even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (painment of gaming media) is not executed.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state of, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that ball lending is not executed (ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Then, the clerk of the game hall or the like performs an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051, so that the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the clerk of the game hall closes the frame 3 for the game machine in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor. The 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closure of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 has a BRDY signal on the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-29 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes ball lending by turning off the PRDY signal or by not turning on the EXS signal. Prevent it from being done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-30. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. It shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. It shall be.

FIG. 22-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 22-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 receives the card. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, the payout control board 21TM037 has the PRDY signal in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal in the ON state, but has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). The PRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 is set even when the BRQ signal is ON (that is, a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

Then, after the BRQ signal is turned on, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses while the EX signal is in the OFF state (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out). do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the BRQ signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 has a BRDY signal on the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The XS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent payout control of the ball lending is executed.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 22-30 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 22-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in FIG. 22-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal remains OFF (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out) after the BRQ signal is turned ON, the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. The BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state even after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has restarted the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The XS signal may be turned on based on the fact that both are in the ON state. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation accepted within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed), and (2) ball lending may be executed. When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-31. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. It shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. It shall be.

22-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 22-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into an ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, with the game control microcomputer 100). When the computer is electrically connected) and the connection confirmation command is being received, the PRDY signal is displayed regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 receives the card. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

The payout control board 21TM037 is an EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. When the BRQ signal falling (OFF) from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media is paid out to the player.

In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. The PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on on the control microcomputer 21TM370 side. In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the game medium can be executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be set. It is possible to reduce the control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period. In addition, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to check the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same time, which can improve workability. can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the continuous reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is finished and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to resume ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on thereafter, FIGS. 22-32 are shown. It will be specifically described using. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the fact that the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, and after the power is turned on, the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Resume the withdrawal that was suspended after the end of the change mode or setting confirmation mode.

22-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into an ON state but turns it into an OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in the stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, the payout control is performed based on the fact that the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is terminated (the connection confirmation signal is turned ON and the PRDY signal is turned ON). The microcomputer 21TM370 for payout controls the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one by one until the data of the number of payouts becomes 0. Perform a payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the power off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the setting is set even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of the subsequent power restoration. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the withdrawal of the suspended game medium and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 22-32, the payout process is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is used. An example was shown in which the suspended payout process is resumed after the end of the game, but this power off is caused by the game hall clerk turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power cut that occurs, or it may be a power cut that occurs when the power switch 21TM055 is turned off due to the closing of business of the amusement park. Further, not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Depending on the state detected, the payout process that is being executed is interrupted, and then it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the interrupted payout process is performed. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power failure)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored is specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-33, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

22-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly terminates (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid quantity data is not stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid quantity storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the game media corresponding to the number of unpaid games are not paid out.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into an ON state but turns it into an OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is maintained in the stopped state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. In addition, since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid pieces that were not paid out due to the cancellation (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done. In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and then when the power is restored, the setting change mode or setting is controlled for the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not executing the payout for the number of unpaid pieces after the confirmation mode ends, the control of backing up the data of the number of unpaid pieces and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIGS. 22-33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not backed up, so that the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a form, as shown in the example shown in FIGS. 22-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the number of unpaid data is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the game media equivalent to the unpaid number is paid out based on the backed up data of the unpaid number (the payout is restarted based on the backup data), while after the power is restored. When controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game medium equivalent to the number of unpaid pieces is not paid out (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. It is also possible not to execute the payout of the game medium equivalent to the number of payouts.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 22-34 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time.

Although not shown, there is a prize during the execution of the connection confirmation communication process (from the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and issues the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), the prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(No prizes in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 22-35 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process.

As described above, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the first general winning port switch to the fourth until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 22-13. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 22-14) for confirming the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like is not executed. The process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIGS. 22-14) and the like are not executed either. Therefore, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination processing or the like is not executed. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base aggregation is not executed. That is, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Therefore, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, each item is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 because it is out of the aggregation period.

During the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 invalidates the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening by not executing the switch processing and the special symbol process processing. And. That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the jackpot determination process or the like is not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100 has not been received. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout control is not executed.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 It is possible to execute switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. In addition, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. The connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the prize openings (when a prize is generated), the CPU 103 detects the prize by executing the switch process, and the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a prize ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which transmits the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game medium. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the switch process is executed within the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the big hit judgment random number is extracted, and the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number. And, in the case where the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number, which is a big hit with the setting value before the change but not with the big hit with the changed setting value (setting value after confirmation), or conversely before the change. The set value of is not a big hit, but the changed setting value (the set value after confirmation) may be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit determination is executed based on the random number for big hit determination. That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game hall may suffer a disadvantage.

In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the big hit determination process is not executed, so that the big hit determination is performed. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game field is prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. Assuming that the setting confirmation mode is different from the setting change mode, it can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, not when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is also performed during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, if the special symbol process process can be executed, a control completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on as in the setting change mode, and the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the big hit determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is standardized and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is the game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? When it is determined whether or not (step S21TM1615) and a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing. Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs depending on whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the game stop error occurs.

By stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 sends the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command of, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not made to execute the payout control. It is possible to invalidate the prize.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). .. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 22-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , Switch processing and special symbol process processing should not be executed.

Further, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute switch processing when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening). It may be. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped for payout control. The microcomputer 21TM370 is not made to execute the payout control, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process processing is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Pachinko machine frame / door frame opening detection method for payout restriction)
FIG. 22-36 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of opening of the game machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation is performed. Receive the connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium will reach the upper plate. It will fall without doing it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a open, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but for the game machine. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and issues a command for preparing a prize ball as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the payout motor 21TM289. Do not execute the payout control of the prize ball without driving. Then, a command for preparing the prize ball as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected is executed. .. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize ball and the prize ball. The data of the unpaid number of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a command for preparing the prize ball as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game medium corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during detection of opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 22-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is said to be impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is played during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is usually open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted from being driven so that the prize balls are not paid out. As a result, the payout of prize balls is restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2).

22-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power outage in separate charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power outage. The pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 22-37 (1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is confirmed" is not performed while the "setting value is being changed", and the power is turned off and restored. The set value at the time is the set value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the pattern related to the power failure shown in FIGS. 22-37 (2) shows the control when the power supply is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is confirmed" is performed while the "setting value is being changed". The set value at the time of power failure is the set value at the time of power failure.

That is, FIG. 22-37 (1) shows the setting when the power is cut off when the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state without the operation of "setting value confirmation" (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). 22-37 (2) shows the control regarding the value, and FIG. 22-37 (2) shows the control regarding the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of "determine the set value" in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Shows.

Further, FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the work of changing the settings from the upper row to the lower row in the order of occurrence (see "Order" column and "Status" column). ). Further, in FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the "lock switch" column. In the "setting value" column, the setting value data (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the "setting value display" column in the figure, the display content (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation is shown. There is.

When the setting change work is performed, as shown at the top of the "Status" column in FIG. 22-37 (1), there is a power-on (order 1) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the right side of the figure. As shown in the column of "lock switch", the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is the ON state. Further, in FIG. 22-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" in the order 1 is "1" because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is "1". , "1".

Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the "setting value display" column is blank because the power has just been turned on at this stage, and the RAM 102 Since it is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

After the "power on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is displayed. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIGS. 22-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON" and the "setting value" column is RAM 102. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of is not changed, and the "setting value display" column is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the set value read from the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is displayed in the setting information temporary storage area.

Subsequently, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON" and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. , As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is displayed. It changes to the new selected value "2".

Furthermore, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and if there is an operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area. By changing the setting value stored in to "2" to "3", the "setting value display" column (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. It changes to the new value "3".

Then, as shown in FIGS. 22-37 (1), when the power is cut off during "changing the set value" (order 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and the power is turned on (order 6), then. In the "setting change mode start" situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" field remains "1" and the "set value display" field is also "1". The same applies when the order 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and the power is cut off without completing the setting change operation (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the setting value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time (before the power is turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled.

Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is confirmed will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power is cut off before the set value is confirmed will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is confirmed, the "set value is confirmed" shown in the order 5 is performed after the "setting value is being changed" shown in the order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1", and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is set to "OFF" based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 into an OFF state.

That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180) in the setting change mode, the setting value "1" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes the setting information temporary storage area. It is overwritten by "3" which is a stored setting value (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)), whereby the set value is fixed (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) is executed. The "set value" column is "3". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that at the time of turning on the power. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” status (? In the order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is stored in the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The "set value" column is "3", and the "set value display" column is also "3". The same applies when the order 8 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while the setting change mode is controlled, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. , The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, if the clerk of the game hall mistakenly shifts the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, it is possible to stop the change of the set value and return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve turning off the power (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power is supplied. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time the power is turned on, so that the set value can be set appropriately and the control regarding the set value is unstable. It is possible to avoid the change and execute appropriate control regarding the set value.

FIG. 22-38 shows the effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). (Image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) shows an example in which notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed is executed.

FIG. 22-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed) (game control). The timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660) and the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated are transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). That is, the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIGS. 22-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and Even though it is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 "detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch" as an abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command. Characters are displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative symbol (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol), the decoration is as shown in FIGS. 22-38 (2). Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., has performed an operation to change the set value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp and confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. In addition, a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is output. May emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing a set value has been detected.

In this embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for performing the operation (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within the period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated during the period when the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the set value is about to be changed illegally.

In this embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Notifies that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed in the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and performs fraud. I try to deter it.

Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and notifies that fact. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or suspended, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or suspended. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is in an open state. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch) on the back surface side thereof. Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position / Or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be able to be operated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are used regardless of whether or not the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. When it is operated, the deterrence of fraud is strengthened by notifying that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 22-39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with 10 information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and a signal corresponding to each information output terminal is output. Will be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIGS. 22-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be ON even when it is.

A signal for the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output from the third terminal. The signal for the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. All start port signals are output from the 4th terminal. The all start port signals are pulse signals that are output when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening and are also output when a game ball is won in the second start winning opening. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

One big hit signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is turned on when it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is also turned on when it is controlled to the high base state. That is, the period during which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as a high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-shaped signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is .1 second. A winning signal is output from the 9th terminal. The winning signal is sent every time a game ball wins a prize at each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). It is a pulsed signal that is output every time a prize is detected by the switch) and is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds at the first starting winning opening). It is judged as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won). In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. ..

In this way, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same 7th terminal. Since the number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 10th terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clearing, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 22-40 (1). Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

If the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal will be ON for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change compatible signal. Will not be in the ON state.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, it is at least based on the input of the security signal. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change compatible signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the RAM clear being executed. Even after the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side where the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input period has reached 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If it is recognizable by the device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, it is recognizable by the management device that it may have been temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is input. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, it is at least based on the input of the security signal. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be recognized separately.

As shown in FIG. 22-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. In this configuration, a security signal is output during the period controlled by the setting change mode, but no security signal is output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled by the setting change mode. Includes a configuration that does not output a security signal and does not output a security signal even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is maintained in the OFF state based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

In this way, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (5). In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (the setting change corresponding signal is OFF).

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In addition, in the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state, while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is in the OFF state), when one signal is in the ON state, the other signal is in the OFF state. It becomes a relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. In addition to being recognizable, it is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed, and the game is played. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIGS. 22-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal, but usually, the output terminal is output. It may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a signal that supports setting changes because there are restrictions on the allocation of signals. In the example of the pattern 2 shown in FIGS. 22-39 (2), an example in which a setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output is shown.

In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when it is controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds at the first starting winning opening). It is judged as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won). In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 22-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

In this way, by being able to output a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility of fraudulent activity, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the mode has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change may have been executed). In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is displayed). The signal output from the 10th terminal is turned off 30 seconds after the end), and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is Since the setting change correspondence signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. By displaying in association with the preset value determined in advance, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game store can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change work. The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings of a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or changing the settings again. can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode ends and the setting confirmation mode ends, but after that, it corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special mode. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a signal corresponding to the setting change of the special mode. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIGS. 22-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of turning on the power is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is completed without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, but the setting change corresponding signal in a special mode is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change correspondence signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed). It is possible to notify the outside of the changed setting value), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and the signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

Further, in this embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined trigger. To. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of prize balls paid out by 1000. At that time (predetermined event is (When it occurs), a signal corresponding to the setting change in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-42 (1), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

This makes it possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device may not properly input the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and the prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method can be strengthened.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 22-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of turning on the power is 1. Then, as a result of changing the set value in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, and the setting change is supported based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3. 3 pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (2), the pulse of 3 is output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the control was controlled to the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 22-41 (2), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the control was controlled to the setting change mode, and the set value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulsed setting change correspondence signal of the number corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. There is. In this way, when controlled to the setting change mode, common signal output processing is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 22-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of turning on the power is 1. Since the set value is not changed in the setting confirmation mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change correspondence signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value of the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). It is possible to notify the outside of the setting value (the setting value stored in the area and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value. It is possible to output a signal notifying the above from a common information output terminal.

In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. , It is turned off 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then from the same terminal 10, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode). ) Setting change correspondence signal will be output.

(Modification example of game control main processing)
Next, other modes relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44. Although FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and FIG. 22- As shown in 43 and FIGS. 22-44, the mode may be changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 22-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to the step S21TM2110 of FIGS. 22-43 and clears input via the input port. Check the status of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM2110).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU103 has the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. The RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and the initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes (processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) associated with the initialization process are the same as those shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIGS. 22-13, and the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if an OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM2120. do. The processes shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 are the same as those shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIGS. 22-13, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting a backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting an initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIGS. 22-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. 22-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting so that the setting value can be confirmed. The mode is changed (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. 22-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is assumed that NO is determined in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIGS. 22-43, and the initialization process (step S21TM2220 or later) is performed. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the process of) is executed. As a result, it is determined as NO in step S21TM2320, and the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes related to steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in steps S21TM1470 to 1470 shown in FIGS. 22-13. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270) and then a setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ), And the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power failure recovery or an initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step). S21TM2520) is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp can be specified. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp can be specified. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since it is possible to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended on the effect control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other modified examples of the feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), but the setting value is not limited to such a form. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the operation can be detected by the game control microcomputer 100), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is compared with the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. When changing the set value, the confirmation of the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game information such as the base is displayed is shown. Not limited to such a form, it is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total game status, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. With such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

Further, a configuration may be provided in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example,). (Change every 5 seconds in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be fixed by overwriting with the set value. The clerk at the game hall switched the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed was displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and was displayed at that time. It is possible to determine the set value as the set value of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to an upper plate or a lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed in the gaming machine and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value. Information indicating that an operation for changing the above has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and it may be possible to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in the hall computer. ..

In the above embodiment, the period is controlled by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, the setting change mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special are based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may be used to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode may be used. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 and the like notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7). The segment display may be made to emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays indicate that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. It may be made to emit light according to the embodiment.

In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security is secured. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off, but the setting change mode is not limited to such a form. Or, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that RAM clear is executed. It becomes possible to specify.

Regarding the expectation degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-5, each effect mode (black star) is determined according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the jackpot expectation degree. The selection ratio of) may be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation is low, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, in the case of 5 or 6), when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, in the case of 5 or 6). It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2). With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expected degree suggestion effect with a number of black stars of 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low expectation of a big hit, the player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform the effect. Since it can be expected that the set value is high, it is possible to improve the interest even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player to play a game. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by a player (for example, big). The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for staging control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is possible to receive the signal output from the gaming device, execute the variable display of the specific identification information, and derive the specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, which is an advantageous state for the player. In a game machine that can be controlled
Game control means and
Production control means and
Display means and
A means for imparting a game value based on a signal output from the game device, and a means for imparting a game value.
The game control means is
It is possible to control the setting permission state to allow the setting of the setting value,
It is possible to output an external signal while controlling to the setting permission state.
When the game medium enters the starting area, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed, and the specific identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the determination, the first fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, the second fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Any variation pattern is determined from a plurality of variation patterns including the third variation pattern, which is the third variation pattern, and the fourth variation pattern, which is the variation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state.
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, the first command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, the second command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the third fluctuation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command is transmitted to the staging control means.
The granting means can grant a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device when controlled to the setting permission state.
The staging control means
The variable display of the decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed by using the display means.
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the control is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is controlled to the advantageous state by a specific reach whose expectation degree to be controlled to the advantageous state is different from that of the predetermined reach.
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
It is possible to execute a common effect in a predetermined period until the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach and the title notification corresponding to the specific reach are performed.
When the first command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed.
When the second command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the production mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is completed.
When the third command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed.
When the fourth command is received, after the predetermined period ends, the title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either the normal mode or the change mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the production mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is completed.
When the first command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the predetermined reach.
When the second command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the specific reach.
When the third command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the predetermined reach.
When the fourth command is received, the decoration identification information can be displayed in the reach mode during the execution of the specific reach.
When the first command is received, a character display for showing that the advantageous state is controlled is displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and then the decoration identification information is displayed in a reach mode. The display means is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in a manner indicating that the predetermined size is larger than that of the case and the control is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the second command is received, a character display for showing that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and then the decorative identification information is displayed in the predetermined size and the advantageous state. The display means is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in an manner indicating that the state is controlled .
The game control means is
When the power is turned on and controlled to the setting permission state, the external signal is output during the period controlled by the setting permission state and for a specific period after the setting permission state ends.
When the power is turned on and the initialization process for initializing the storage of the storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting permission state, the gaming machine that outputs the external signal over the specific period. ..

Images